Home

Here - Silberauto

1. Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty 5 weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ee TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer
2. eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector one 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the the replacement bulb taillamp housing 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillamp housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing 81672737 1 Tail Stop Lamp 2 Turn Signal Lamp 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Changing the Backup Lamp 1 Open the trunk 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing 81b7273b 1 Rear Fog Lamp 2 Backup Lamp 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clock wise to lock it in place License Plate Lamp 1 Remove two retaining screws holding the lamp lens in place 819ba516 Cee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 2 Gently pry the lens loose 3 Pull bulb from socket replace and reattach the lamp lens with the two retaining screws Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 1 Open the trunk lid 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the CHMSL hous ing 819ba5152 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket
3. Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraints Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors However any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 74 THINGS
4. 413 El Trachom Grades 45445445 ce md Posee x9 RAD 415 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Temperature Grades 44 sins oa oh e erba d 416 Quality Grades sy Shes a bee ORE E Od 415 O Tread weal 2 2 422 4e 4 e44h054 82 415 eee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and
5. ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045607559 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or Mix mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to retu
6. Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its per formance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Automatic Transaxle This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake contained within a single housing failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident The fluid level in the automat
7. Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 3 022607066 Front Airbag Components 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC they are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Driver Front Airbag Front
8. master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change a el ee eo i ee r2 e Change the engine oil filter hj Inspect the brake hoses and lines ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 18 000 Miles 30 000 km o
9. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel prop erties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manu facturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC specifications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in s
10. Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints In addition the front passenger seat belt includes a two stage load limiting feature to enhance occupant pro tection for the same reason NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determine
11. TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the fre
12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 288 STARTING AND OPERATINC M 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor
13. ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the following functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns
14. 0000 299 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 307 aloo Piler Can MISERE areae da can 301 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 308 M Vehicle Loading cessum Reader ess 302 AE E ties apie nm todas d O Vehicle Certification Label 302 ON ENDS Sea gg eta ooh are om o Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 309 W Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 314 4 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 302 D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ELOSETIOSUIHID ce mace de E UR Nep Y A Vg e 303 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The CIODI ev ow us seas een dacedese TU SES 314 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 235 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Automatic Transaxle The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear N
15. 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find
16. 90 Automatic Door Locks sess 30 31 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 152 162 390 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 222 en INDEX 419 Automatic Transaxle 12 235 239 362 Adding TVG 21 224 29 5299 99 1 Ee 363 364 388 Filer Ferr 364 Fluid and Filter Changes 364 Fluid Level Check 42222 29922 363 364 Interlock System Lus erac gb poire irae M Rede 240 241 Reset NOUS usa Pure 4 ie OR E SORIERURU os a 245 oelechon OF LUBEICIDE s a eae n ees the 92x 388 ODIT eae wire so ETE BERE ES PETI SES 209 Special AddIUVES E P 4 ms 364 PUSH os ea eas Be oe Be espe P eae 246 re UPL N teretengeeouyy ot ou ane ss 381 rr App rcc 346 Gas CAUTION TTC 347 Jomp larung sx utu e Eu a Pee n a E 29 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 IOSSUDH 43 9ucba ch ou eee RSS PRSIGO ES SES 346 Belts Seat X os e623 56 hese Eds oe ee eee 83 Body Mechanism Lubrication 350 B Pilar Location 4 246 63c hoe gio iia Mies Rao 268 Brake Assist DUBIO pido 4 edn gee decr d dd ars 257 Drake TAKING pda cubes eke ate Sox eo be el 202 Drake Dy ste ucro aaro S03 oe eia diras a achats 360 Anti Lock ABS amp v gopceit acies x ad 3e 6 5 95813 254 Fud Check 122 245 9222 3x x42 360 388 Master Cynder su acuerda eet eitr 26551 360 POON fee eyeee qe ey saga weave hae a 252 Wath Light uendere S mre sociedad ea kes 148 pci ACCIPIT 360 Brake7 Transaxle Interlock v vasa xc bres 240 Break
17. AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO Operating Instructions Radio Mode EIUS PADO Ainii iii aa NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side tetadio laceuiate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio ru Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is
18. O Ignition Key Removal i424 a aa dn 12 O Key In Ignition Reminder 14 B Locking The Doors With The Key 14 NM Sentry Key ocsosseschenkee9 umb e Y RES 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RP Tax E So 16 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped o Rearming The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System Bi illuminated Entry System If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped o To Unlock The Doors D To Lock The Doors 0 To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME H Using The Remote Open Window Feature Mm Power Windows 444222454 su4tdoe546452 33 IUEQUHPESG are i sea sbescue anne E BH Power Window Switches 4 aea d uc cm mes 33 o Using The Panic Alarm a da e dea exi 24 3 Auto Window Down If Equipped 34 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 o Auto Window Up If Equipped 35 D Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 amdo LO ou we il Lo rs ER 36 O General Information cec sena kh eri Ek s 26 5 Wind Buffeting isse 36 ll Remote Start System If Equipped M W Trunk Lock And Release s 37 0How To Use Remote Start essence RS 27 B Trunk Safety Warning 0 0 0 0 00000 37 W Door Locks 0 0 ee eee 20 D Trunk Internal Emergency Release 38 c Manual Door Locks 2
19. Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section for details A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoul der and lap belt on the child restraint The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button and allow the webbing to retract into the retractor 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large eno
20. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 2
21. e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures Re e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will spare tire not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an acc
22. ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension ma
23. instrument cluster FM 101 1 10 041008230 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The EVIC consists of the following The system allows the driver to select information by e System status pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel switch bank located below the climate controls e Vehicle information warning message displays Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to Trip Functions or Personal set e Compass heading display N S E W NE NW SE MENU pte to return to the default System status SW e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features MENU Button e Outside temperature display F or C STEP Press and release the STEP button to advance e Trip computer functions v the display through the various Trip Functions or Personal settings e Audio mode displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD STEP Title and Track number when playing Button e Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if Press and release the COMPASS button to equipped A display the compass heading and the outside temperature COMPASS Button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 Press and release the RESET button to accept a Preser selection The RESET button also resets various Trip Functions RESET Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the followin
24. it is locked in position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Rear Seat Belts The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen gers on sedans The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking mode 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie
25. manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 262 STARTING AND OPERATING M ESC Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Malfunc tion Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation ESC Operating Modes All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situa tions ESC should only be tur
26. ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 7 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you norm
27. size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 There are different sizes and types of restraints for vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher children from newborn size to the child almost large weight limit in the rearward facing direction than enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your less than one year old child Infants and Small Children WARNING e Safety experts recommend that children ride Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible chil
28. 050 in 1 27 mm ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 2 4L and 2 7L Engines 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended Engine Coolant 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is Brake Master Cylinder not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir VOTAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid or equivalent Power Power Steering Reservoir Reservoir MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 390 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 0 390 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving
29. 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Io make your selection press and hold the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 seconds appears Headlights With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on
30. 3 Instrument Cluster 8 Glove Compartment 13 Trunk Release Button 4 Ignition Switch 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 5 Analog Clock 10 Hazard Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BANDE CRUISE BERS Soe Nu d 040307597 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
31. 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i General Information POWER SUNRO
32. ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up 815afata Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START NOTE e If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder If this THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop erable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK pos
33. CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language ef
34. E Occupant Restraints llle 39 O Power Door Locks 0 005 30 O Lap 5houlder Belts reccs ka Rs 40 O Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors 32 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 46 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 46 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 LH Rear Seat Belts H Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped D Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR ema perm ee P CX ee ws O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert H BeltAlert Programming O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women O Seat Belt Extender less O Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags O Airbag System Components H Advanced Front Airbag Features 56 O Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 61 D Event Data Recorder EDR OChild Restraints ag wt ved ie be ERR ERR 70 A rins porine Pete 223 4 9s d netit Sheena ES 81 ll Engine Break In Recommendations 81 la Safety lips eee ee eee ee 82 El Iramsportine Passengers sc0ceuscaeea dss 82 A Ex WANs Gade a0 2 999 51782 3 1 EROR ee es ones 82 O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The VOICE osea hes p S PATENTE Se 83 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 3359 464 4 ESTER 84 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie A WORD
35. Ex treme Cold Weather procedures 238 STARTING AND OPERATING M With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly It is located between the front grille and the radiator but underneath the black upper seal WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE WARN
36. For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH in this section 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder
37. In Recommendations New Vehicle 81 Bulb Replacement 4 asse scka ye ke ORE RA EUER 377 BUS LIONU sasa saa pan eaa E e S a 84 377 Calibration CompdsS s vers c9 Re Goes 165 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 20 Capacities Fluid ne esed Caps Filler dr 299 Oil Ene aes 6 044 hee ees 335 336 337 344 Power DIGGEIO eraras koe e RUE RUP 9e d d o 291 Radiator Coolant Pressure 397 Rat Washes rw 366 Carbon Monoxide Warning 82 294 Largo ted DOSIHTOS as at coo Ree eee E Rd Sdn 134 Caro COMPARED s 2 vvv ques rore pen es ves 134 Cardo Load FIOO uses senior oe m ic ones 4 a pars 134 Cargo Vehicle L ading cei Seit aene noa ees Ge 134 Cellular PRONE sas nn 6 hs oS SEE kria BH 93 217 Center High Mounted Stop Light 385 Chains Lire s euet RS SUR C224 ese bases 279 changing A Plat Ile ix ous rtr eg e x4 318 Clan DU IAS ech eee ean deemed d o Red e 265 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 339 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 82 Check cI asombro PE os EAE E oe TEN 82 Child Restraint lt 3 4 4 u se644 Rs 70 71 76 79 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 76 Chil Sane LOCKS aus xe scq o 9 eS ee UR AER wos 32 Cigar EIPDISE 2x esca eis S SUPR CE seca eins 131 Clean Air Gasoline uas eds do rac s goku se ERA 29 Cleaning lcg 367 Windshield Wiper Blades 351 Climat
38. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391 NOTE Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil Descriptions section of this manual if it has been six months sin
39. L E S 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Oe MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle 150 Months Maintenance Service t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer Schedule m mE to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter warranty L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter 21 Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine WARNING except PZEV e You can
40. Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains o
41. Pm 107 Headlights On With Wipers isse 115 Pigh Dean Indicator aab aur resete Bans OR Rn 4 159 IUD ted PANY urere a quie Peste de Ed E Ge des 20 Instrument Cluster less 107 AMi x2 3 acide CoS AGO ES B ES S S 111 Een ETETE Boab eet de eee sy eee ne ewes 384 Lie ts On Reminder scaume veges anes dE Emi 110 LOW Uel 464444 446688 ou ee SET ERE Ghee A 147 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 157 Map ReAGING oa oe oer 26 aban Rn he eee eos 111 Oil PrESSUtE uou scewdup oa E bee oe Ss 148 Passe see eeeaeeee hey oaths s C RR Pd E 109 Kear tall 2 esieaute see eae nieka ERR ee po 381 Seat Belt Reminder Ls 147 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 154 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 156 281 Traction Control i42425ae 4e5 44 9E SS 261 Turn Signal ns CSsSCSCSC C VOE 2 sanubtee et eee Ge sour sess 147 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 146 Loading Vehicle 1 9 eee fe wee fios A Deere RE 302 303 COPadues use doses as edn Sup dees ae ee x 303 TIS 1235059 3 uos ES a a ee 268 Locks Auto Unlock lt 2 xznuitec BA 45433094 484 9l Child Protection leen 32 Power DOOR 04464 vaccis go dy X aredd ks 30 Low Tite Pressure System lt c2scceessst s OP 281 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CORI regard ereere RU ee EE S oe ead 76 L bncation DOY eseas Edo m gee reprak dn a 350 L mbar SUPPO
42. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW M
43. Procedure 222299 29wxssitk ys 46 Seat Belts Sedan lens 39 cp EPT 94 AdjS uuu sac qop REESE RO dos y dx Ed e s 94 mW o n fs 4 tac ote 8G a hea eee 2 oe 104 FICHCG uerus SURG RR A VRESERRENEESTENXS 101 Uber SUP POI a5 cache ee eee oe 6 Do aus 97 DOW cei nues oa dane 295429 398 29 3 2 2 9 25 4 97 Rear TONG eos en ak 39 E94 weg ade 103 104 Rear Folding Sedan ue d pom hore o oen 134 Dra uio P aac 62 sane ne Oo ener ee Ge 96 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 355 387 Selection of Oil vee deue need doe bee eee 343 Sentry Key Immobilizer 2 2449 ey eem 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 16 Service Assistance eee eee eens 409 Service Contract 5 44 0 93 bee Phe ee he Eus 411 Service Manuals ies eh oa bo GRR EH ES 413 Setting the Clock 3447428545 ES 169 172 186 189 198 bellnm Personal sespe miarik Ss dd dE Ges 167 Shifting Automatic Transaxle 0 0020 eee 239 lile VIS iM Bells ask NR ES oo ois Fea ee TO 40 DIG RNA os sse RXURS PR as os RS ra ees 64 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 229 oionals WW 626 nade oo Poe hore EB E RS 84 381 Slippery ourtaces Driving Qn suo duequa qure s 247 Snow Chains Tire Chains 279 vidit MTM 280 veri ANS PP 275 318 Specifications OIL Vll eu ee eee ee eee 343 Speed Control Cruise Control 117 152 verser Pp 146 AUNT
44. Remove the cupholder liner e Insert a key screwdriver or similar object into the front hole then push and hold the manual override release lever forward e While holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL e Release the override MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Mi Engine Compartment 2 4L 335 W Maintenance Procedures 341 lBl Engine Compartment 2 7L 336 BB 91 MP 342 E Engine Compartment 3 5L 997 E Ene Hier esso vios our ab ease Se 345 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 338 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 346 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 338 E Maintenance Free Battery a xkesenenkee Mi Emissions Inspection And Maintenance D Air Conditioner Maintenance HORT AM PP m 339 A C Air Filter If Equipped 349 B Replacement Parts 340 2 Body Lubrication 000 eee ees 350 W Dealer Service issued dE ES uh eevee TAA 341 o Windshield Wiper Blades 351 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M H Adding Washer Fluid o Exhaust System ACooling Systemi auus eas Rondo tesi O Drake S SION auus eura 2 WO Rad Ey o Automatic Transaxle D Appearance Care And Protection From CONDSIDIE rv odo eS SEE AT ete bh SPESE o Cleaning Center Console Cupholders ll Fuses o Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM ll Vehicle Storage ll Replacement Bulbs poz 354 3
45. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
46. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions CAUTION When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed low
47. The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which eq
48. VEHICLE See Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test flammable and can explode injuring you Other tUHON unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause CAUTION the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Section 3 of the Warranty Information book lo cated on the DVD for further warranty informa system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tion tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized
49. WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side
50. a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil l
51. a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate cm SINGLE DISC WPI PUSA AU 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass st
52. age to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Continued e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to e Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tires General Information in this section for vehicle and the trailer such that the following four proper tire inflation procedures ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres 2 GTW sures before trailer usage 3 GAWR e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General utilized This requirement may limit the ability to Information in this section for information on tread always achieve 10 of trailer tongue weight as a wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure percentage of total trailer weight
53. alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Side Airbags If Equipped Supplemental seat side airbags provide enhanced protec tion and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The supplemental seat side airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential Side Airbag In flatable Curtains SABIC Io for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy NOTE SONS a a a a a a e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle may deploy tion e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes sens
54. and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the CHMSL housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES 16 9 Gallons 18 5 Gallons Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 Quarts 5 5 Quarts 5 5 Quarts 2 4L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent z Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 116 Quarts 1 Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 64 Liters 70 Liters 4 4 Liters 5 2 Liters 5 2 Liters 7 7 Quarts 7 3 Liters 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT i anic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler for correct SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting Chrysler Material Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent ZFR5AP Gap 0 031 in 0 8 mm TE10PMC5 Gap 0
55. any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Sunroof Operation Opening Sunroof Manually Press the switch rearward and hold and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically During this opera tion any release of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manually To close the sunroof from an open or vent position press and hold the switch forward The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically Release the switch to stop sun roof travel at any point 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully then stop automatically This is called Ex press Close During Express Close operation any move ment of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Auto Sunroof Express With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped D
56. be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratchi
57. belts The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Continued conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
58. brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels poin
59. by this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio uconnect phone if equipped and ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the RESET button until OFF 30 60 or 90 seconds appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the EVIC this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units in English or Metric The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock lo ca
60. care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fold Flat Passenger Seatback The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded The recline handle on the front passenger seat also rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel releases the seatback to fold forward Ern Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Seatback Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Folding Rear Seat WARNING To provide additional storage area the rear seatback can be folded forward Pull on the loops shown in the picture The rear cargo area of the vehicle with the rear to fold down either or both seatbacks seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system When returning the rear seatback to the upright position be sure the seatback is latched Folding Rear Seats 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with To open the hood two latches must be released Moins 1 Pull the hood r
61. carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the
62. contains Carbon Mon S Spe EVER E oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood aoci injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Trunk closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button e Battery at an acceptable charge level and x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec e RKE PANIC button not pressed onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e Ignition key removed from ignition switch 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e f an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button o
63. could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch Auto Door Lock If Equipped When enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Auto Unlock On Exit Auto Unlock On Exit Programming The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with The Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature can be power door locks if enabled or disabled as follows 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature is en e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle abled Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform
64. do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tether Cable ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so will cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle i
65. e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next and so forth listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button located in the center of the switch to P the button in th ter of th itch to t t aa a a MM a change to the next preset that you have programmed the next preset that you have programmed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance fro
66. eeng e 109 159 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 109 On With IPES tana eae te Seances ema 115 PO GOT 626 4564665404545 450 2608 Oras 109 RODIBIOHD jteceaeen s qp wed au x hae d ore SWIC E TIT 107 Heated Seats 2 x ode 2 wee ho Sa e Bete be ww 101 LIGdPOl 93 ae pean EEEE ee Shee 218 Heater Engine Block sa cuero RR 238 Hitches Taer TOWE oos siodedir aor dried e m RC ied d iod 306 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 120 Hood POD crm 105 Hood Release 1 1 ee 104 426 INDEX M UUO orrera RESINA RE ES DE ENXAS 12 d MATT 12 DOE Pcr 12 Ignition Key Removal eed he rw kasd 12 Uuminated Entry ois ea Soe caw en epee eee 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 2e se mee ys 15 Infant Restraint lt lt ness xe s 60 54 48 idrat 70 71 Information Center Vehicle 159 Inside Rearview Mirror Ls 89 Instrument Cluster 0005 145 146 Instrument Panel and Controls 144 Instrument Panel Cover 368 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 370 Integrated Power Module Fuses 971 Interior Appearance Care uuu iue hex edes dep xcd 368 Iter Lights usua een ts cacy caeed seed ded 111 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 113 DEFOGHCHODE 444340264 hee ded EE P REI S RES 4 Jack L cati n 65 44 44 42 5 pP aa et oe ee RES LR Ue 318 Jack OPErAION seni ee aid the Bi eee hones 318 320 Jacking Instructions ps ues duod
67. engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling 7 system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to ass
68. event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle
69. flashing 5 Drive the vehicle slowly under 5 mph 8 km h completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings V 9 Compass Variance Map 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the shift lever in PARK 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the STEP button until Compass Variance and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to increment the Variance Value by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around fro
70. for another 15 minutes Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch one door must be open or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter doors can be open or closed and close all doors NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE e During the 16 second arming period if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned ON the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm e Once armed the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel the trunk release button on the instrument panel and the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped To Dis
71. front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer and its cargo Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trail
72. handle and pull it upward until you feel resistance To release the parking brake grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing the button on the end of the handle When the button drops into the handle releasing the lock guide the handle downward to its stop and then release the button and the handle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 e If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop The Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application CAUTION Parking Brake NOTE If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the RE SN eer parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately e The parking brake will not release unless the handle is pulled upward slightly past its applied position 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A chil
73. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area and have Finish tightening th Push h h POLIUS HERO QUIE eon Ban the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have EGER ING tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have station the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 325 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE WARNING Continued Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or sion cannot be started this way Also t
74. have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leak
75. ie Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Pulling Out the Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck reduces the ris
76. is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec tors disconnected for prolonged periods Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at anytime the igni tion switch is in the ON position Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and
77. is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized 2 dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to your autho rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unautho rized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes For the first three minutes the horn will sound intermittently and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash
78. lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch completely with clear water metal and painted surfaces e f insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is do
79. oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Rotate tires replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 2 4L PZEV Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary 2 7L and 3 5L Engines Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Flush and replace the engine coolant damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter I Rotate tires Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect
80. or rollover collisions 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to ei
81. or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately 2 seconds Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the odometer will display the following messages snp PCT rv Door Ajar si c cr L RG Trunk Ajar LOW THE 22er RR Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required pPASCAT LL igo ente dU ERES EE Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL Transaxle Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then warnings such as Low Tire Door Ajar and Trunk Ajar will display in the EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for
82. studios Satellite Radio in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to Video Entertainment System VES in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS M DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE RER REN AM FM CD DVD RADIO IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detaile
83. the 4 The driver door is opened following procedure 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ue 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors The Child Protection Door Lock Rear Doors are located inside the rear edge of the door Insert the tip of the Child Lock Control ignition key or similar flat bladed object into the lock and rotate approximately one quarter turn to the lock or unlock position as indicated by the stamped icons Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up UNLOCKED position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on the driver s door has up down switches that g
84. the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is program mable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Auto Window Up If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To cancel the Auto Up movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE ANTI PINCH PROTECTION e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING When the window is almost closed there is no anti pinch protection To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
85. the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter O O C C O L L L L L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U
86. the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Rotate the center portion upward to the last detent to aimed at a specific spot if desired The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Interior Li
87. the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Step 5 Pro gramming A Rolling Code System 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink butto
88. the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is i located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 4 Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to approximately 2 0 gal lons 7 6 Liters the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound NOTE This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3 0 gallons of fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your local authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 7 Airbag Warning Light The light comes on and remains on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
89. the start of track 1 NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD CAUTION recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Inserting Compact Disc s e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD away and jam the player mechanism label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into amp RES isa single CD player Do not attempt to insert the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the a second CD if one is already loaded Continued 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Continued e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button
90. to the trunk latching mechanism am Trunk Internal Emergency Release EE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems The following safety features are standard on all vehicles Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems
91. using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e e vice meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install t
92. visiyiro PP 126 nnn TID P IIPTTTUT 33 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 54 Preparatioi lor JACKING ses crassa pert peaa iaaa 319 Pretensioners Deal DOG aig ioni a aa dams anne deus pen 48 Programmable Electronic Features 167 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Eh 5 644 408 4524 4445 ER 25 add T TES uoces eaaa 275 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 397 Raidio OPEOR sesira sane eee dap d dod as 217 Radio Remote Controls nonoa aaaea aaa 215 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 209 Rear CUpmolier oo a eae ocio anie P one PE TOES 133 Rear sear BOUE sage ceusgncaeeun ent 103 104 Rear Window Defroster less 139 Rear Window Features sn 139 Rearview Mirrors 0 0 0 eee eee es 89 Recreational TOWING sucus ce soa P wan caw ee eee 314 Reformulated Gasoline 0005 291 suani P eee ee eee Oo 349 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000 52 53 Remote Control Door Locks 4 sme see S RATES os eee RUE RE E eS 20 Decir At e ecoute d eR EK She Gee Ed pu 18 Remote Keyless Entry RKE s 444544 p42 e044 5 20 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Nn INDEX 431 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 215 Remote Starting GySTEM 244 0444 Gees ee eae os 26 Remote Dunk Keleace 4 4 62206 Curs oe 04 Nd oF Replacement Bulbs x ua uot ees da cae 377 Replacement Keys ths seu fuk desc bean bea oes 16 Replacement Pats aac a i
93. your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Reset Auto Up Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead the Auto Up function will be disabled To reactivate the Auto Up feature pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of you to disable the window control on the other doors To pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the disable the window controls on the other doors press the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the window LOCK button To enable the window controls windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting Window Lockout Switch en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle From inside the vehicle the trunk lid can be released by pressing t
94. 0 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses TP KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada 290 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L and 2 7L Engine All engines are designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel 8 economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline 800d ape having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 3 5L Engine RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD The 3 5L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD 89 800dfab7
95. 167 Daytime Running Licht vasco ms 110 IB s uri A pm 341 Deck Lid Power Release 37 Defroster Rear Window ea 139 Defroster Windshield 84 220 226 Delay Intermittent Wipers 29 113 Diagnostic System Onboard uus sated ae nds 338 Dimmer Switch Headlight sss 6 ea aem tress 109 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 363 364 OU EDOM soc 83 9 SE ye E et ee RO SUE 342 Power SIEEN 25 s ras a dices d PROS Pen A aaa E d 251 Disabled Vehicle Towing 0 929 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 39 e xs 358 Engine Oil 422 INDEX M Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System E 85 Fuel Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Emergency In Case of Jacking Jump Starting Towing Emergency Tronk Release 242222499499 37 38 Emission Control System Maintenance 339 390 ENO E 335 336 337 Air Cleaner 2 cs s 0e Ro ew RRS eee RS 346 Block Heater oomen E REX fe eee E 238 Break In Recommendations 81 Checking Om Level es ues qaa e Sete IE RES 342 Coolant Antifreeze 355 387 Sos erne P eee 354 Exhaust Gas Cauti
96. 2 162 343 390 din PP TER 342 DIPS r RP 342 pool a eee a 345 ID 25s hve obey c45 lt 4 eos Fete eae 345 387 Filter Disposal 2x s bro rr edges eaee xs 345 Identiiication LOBO s as v xot 45484 dod aot 343 Materials Added to llle 345 Recommendation 343 386 DVINCHC T 345 NISCOSIUY aesdbctiebgdqSw Re db 344 386 OUTING CTS prapa 3 49 IUE EUER EIER DIRE d 345 Oil Filter Selection s 22 444 u gne dcr PE md 345 OU Pressure Light oi epea hed ko d eost acad 148 Onboard Diagnostic System 3 Lever 338 339 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 120 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 2 Overdrive 2o odd HE aed 3 EE S RUE Er ES 243 244 OVerDedquanb POING e wa tue v eds d egre pare ree x 316 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4413 Fait Cole PP 365 Panic lat sadse ee ena decas h46e eed a oo 24 Parking Drake oou ROLLE ICE SOr V ed ed dcs 252 Parkin On Ell ius ceder td oe eR E Rd 252 Passi DIS UE aq EAREN EER 109 Personal SENES 2444422640549 09504 a Ges 167 VOUS Cr Phone Cellular 430 INDEX M Phone Hands Free uconnect 93 Placard Tire and Loading Information 268 Power Deck Lid Release uoce scpacouue d Re Toc 9 d Ede 4 07 Door LOCKS sx agiis Pr PT 30 NOS sanes e enn dees aaeheau ss 90 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 129 c D arr d O Scu veg hasan ees yee eo PE 250 251
97. 60 362 365 370 371 371 376 SYN 952 W Bulb Replacement o3 499 s2btd4a cee aes 377 AH ad seere dti niapi E 377 O Front Turn Signal Parking Lamp 979 OFront Fog Lamp 24 24 uate yd pr ELS SEE 380 o Tail Stop Rear Turn Signal And Backup LOPS ace adem hoe ERUIT PISA b CAES E 381 O License Plate Lamp a 2s soo ens to ford 9 RSS 384 o Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMOD rue xn arp Ede EE AERE 385 W Fluids And Capacities Less 386 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 387 APND 4 4 aueh ree BR RE REA qu ehe E 387 OA NASSE 4445664 540 645 uot eneoee RSS 388 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 070305924 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 3 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Integrated Power Module 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Power Distribution Center 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ie ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 7L 070505925 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Power Distribution Center 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 10 Engine Oil Fill 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 ENGI
98. ANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Electronic Stability Control ESC Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped xi The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active Th
99. ATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed STARTING AND OPERATING 281 The suggested rotation method is shown in the following TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS diagram E C ES gt 055707139 Tire Rotation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at le
100. Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 318 Ei Jack Location ues 44 a 663 62 ha oo 85S ER 318 El Spare Tire 5lOWBDE 5 6 Hever ed cane Ux a es 318 Ei Preparations Por Jacking iussa e E ees 319 O Jacking Instructions qas v1 sastrana daami 320 B Jump Starting Procedure 325 316 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 316 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle H Towing With The Ignition Key H Towing Without The Ignition Key o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle B Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle MIE TODOS amp ee ob ao 4 Goo oe eee a H Towing Without Power Override Transaxle Interlock System 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warni
101. Control Operation Chart that follows for details ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Control Operation Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Automatic Temperature Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower Control Automatic User selectable to any speed Mode Control Automatic Automatic The system will Air Temperature Control Automatic Automatic Air Recirculation Control Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time A C Operation Automatic Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User sclectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirc
102. DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink b
103. EING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and FIRST gear Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective Ne WHAT TO DOO IN EMERGENCIES 329 NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system to Partial OFF WARNING before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Elec Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tronic Brake Control in Section 5 for further information ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or on of this manual even failure of the axle and tires A tire could CAUTION explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween Ist and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 6 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast Towing With The Ignition Key may lead to transmission overheating and failure Front Wheel Drive It can also damage the tires Do n
104. ICLE 137 81974143 Storage Console Detail 1 Release Top Compartment 2 Release Bottom Compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment The left latch opens to the top storage area The lower bin can be accessed directly without first exposing the upper bin by operating the right latch with the armrest down The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder room for CD s DVD s and a power outlet that allows a cellular phone to recharge while concealed NOTE e A notch in the side of the console base under the armrest will also allow use of cellular phone while still plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest latched down e The power outlet located inside the console can also energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker s Package 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Video Console If Equipped The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components e The screen for a rear seat DVD player is stored under the armrest e Remote Control e Audio Video RCA Jacks Video Console Refer to Video Entertainment System If Equipped in Section 4 of this manual for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate con
105. ING CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift the shift lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift the shift lever into or out of REVERSE only e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift the shift lever from REVERSE PARK Denm or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting the shift lever into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You MUSI press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting the shift lever out of PARK 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is
106. L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped except PZEV Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chry
107. MANUAL t80 INTRODUCTION 5 ELECTRONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE SPEED CONTROL prie SYSTEM D O HILL DESCENT WARNING PARIONG CONTROL BRAKE a3 ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTELOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM AWD 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DRIVE BRAKE TOW HAUL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL AIC PUSH oca AU ELECTRONIC CONDITIONER CONTROL OFP 010507683 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on engraved on the front right door sill under door sill moulding and on the vehicle registration or title A ai Vehicle Identification Number EE INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS un Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12
108. MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling kept Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take l
109. MS as damage to the sensors may result UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of IC an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans axle control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 24 Transmission Temperature Indicator If Equipped During sustained high speed driving on hot Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause days the automatic transmission oil may be damage to the engine control system It also could come too hot If this happens the transmission affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is overheat indicator light will come on and the flashing severe catalytic converter damage and vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transmis power loss will soon occur Immediate service is sion cools down enough to allow a return to the re required quested speed If th
110. NE COMPARTMENT 3 5L 070907578 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as maintaining engine emissions well within current government regu lations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist an authorized service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is runni
111. OF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following reading lights two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device BO 034207189 Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or
112. OTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start Four Speed Transaxle turn the ignition switch to the START posi tion and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ee For vehicles equipped with Tip Start Six Speed Trans axle turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle
113. P3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or
114. Passenger Airbag Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Supplemental Seat Side Airbags If Equipped Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as
115. STANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF CAUTION m e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw An optional ash receiver is available from your autho power from the vehicle s battery even when notin rized dealer and will fit in the center console front use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if cupholder plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Ash Receiver 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M a being heated When the LED is Blue the cupholder is For vehicles equipped with the heated and cooled being cooled cupholder locate the cup holder ash receiver in the forward cupholder The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter You may use the power outlet located in the instrument panel below the climate control knobs or in the bottom of the console compartment for this cigar lighter CUPHOLDERS Heated Cooled Cupho
116. Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 266 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold
117. Sup 279 ANGUS goo a SOS yee Ve E Sade d RP Sb 318 Compact Spare sas reia iae de E VES mean 275 General Information 4 272 LUI SD 3 9 coa obs SERERE eee PR ee es 274 Inflation esses 2 45 o0 ens t E i RE AES 2 9 A ECC m 318 434 INDEX M Ite OF UI EQ 278 Oa 4 aDACIDI aioe 4 e PER UR E08 Pei died d 268 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 281 Pressure Warning Light uu ode up mm m os 156 Quality Grading ua sues 2 es Sie ke dree ages 415 CIC MP 2 9 KReplaceilen qm 278 ROGOR exe dude edes E Rae adr rex 5544 58 280 i A rr eas 264 272 2 Tr 265 voy LINCS PD ee ee oe ee 280 OPa G erene wes ee Fae eek es 318 DOWNING P eae oo oes oot ee oe ees 276 Tread Wear Indicators 277 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 308 Uo n AC God Gee ae ee eee 304 Disabled Vebicle sss ox d ade pe ER Goa eR E 329 SD P e 307 ISSeredtonal 545 2605 een ERER ERA EEEN 314 WIG eo oo 44258 oo oe ocean eee eee oe 307 yc eines Gap ee eee to oes eS ee 248 Dae TOWNS stage ed pee 4 dodo arg oes ede 304 Cooling System LIDS 4 sace ced teehee eben er 314 TCC i PPP ope Boe eee a 306 Minimum RequiremerilS aduana ee ti 309 Trailer and Tongue Weight 308 Trailer lowing Guide 242244494 4444626 5 307 Ter VOID oue eres b suqebdveraqeu i rss 307 Transaxle PROGIUIVOES PP ey oS Born oe bos 364 Automati a ad 46a 4 Raw dw k
118. TARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 5 ya 31 v NO 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description D ry 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire
119. TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Tu
120. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ru AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 i
121. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 WARNING Continued the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get engine is flooded it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of enough power to continue running when the key is this manual for proper jump starting procedures released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 sec and follow them carefully onds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or
122. UE SIS oe gee Seca 9 3 E ees 84 HElaslt Tosl 388 donee c9 ues 2455 e Erw eee Ex d 109 Flexible Fuel Vehicles sess 295 Cue ROUES wekataesmeprdesvbTeteess 298 ERES CIT parea peia macie dope eur eae es 298 Piel RegUIreMENS va Pouredpa aique Sq 205 297 Maintenance ua 2s ache m cedex ERR E 3 33 295 299 Replacement Paris es sac nasi sca RR OR ee 299 DUAN PLE 298 Flooded Engine Starting 25s sce sos rie 236 Floor Console 624454445 EG ra P KEES ES 136 Fluid apaciles 6 464 ey Mees se pas eae Sees 386 Fiuid Leaks o 222 429 2250 025242 929 9 5 84 oe s dqssesssiessssqqRumM Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 363 364 ei us ses USE RENS Re E EUN S ES 360 388 Coole oysk 3 sca x e dne SUPCR RES 405 200 EXP Ol so 2 yaa gure eae Auc eae eae gees 342 POWer DIGO I IB x cesso toi gene e os 251 388 Pits NOR ees eos eee hee a E ees 387 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 387 Foo LI NCOI ood vue veh d 99r pee Ee P das 380 PO LENE a cae uot dens eh a Bes hr ra dr s 109 154 380 Foldin Rear Seal s aco osu come 265 ip i 103 104 Freeing A Stuck Vebiel 222354 x arbre si 328 Duel seeds dkat Eri enuei Femmes s 290 dI erre dE e SS dd rra 299 Additives ces 293 CIO AE c2 Saas RN ES Bh ee Eee as 291 LEOanbb 225 2 ooo OOo ee 4932392425225 291 Piller Cap Gas Cap 23v 446 E aks 146 299 Piller Door Gas Cap sob e nen seki gebe 146 G350lnO 4 ho 4 4S Bee ee eee 290 ero oraret Gap eee ee Go bas ea
123. VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 125 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary
124. a 5157 Dac p Lamp asra vega a ee ee oe Ye 3157 Licne Dan sos bat eee ee Ie 8 Pee E eig W5W Feont Position Lampe reses we ee acd he xe rys W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1 Raise and prop open the hood Locate the connector behind the headlamp NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver s side of the vehicle 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Reach into engine compartment and from behind the 3 Rotate bulb and connector one quarter turn and pull lamp assembly and grasp the connector outward from assembly CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb Front Turn Signal Parking Lamp 1 Raise and prop open the hood 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp housing 81911575 5 If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 6 Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one quarter turn to secure 81b71ee8 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the co
125. a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 3076 compared
126. abel that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to the graphic below for FUSES TIPM location 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Description Ignition Off Draw Green IOD Sense 1 Ignition Off Draw Green IOD Sense 2 Battery Feed Battery Feed 10 Am Center High Power Seats if Red P Mounted Stop equipped PZEV Light CHMSL Air Pump if Brake Switch equipped 10 Amp Battery Feed Ig Battery Feed Red nition Switch Cabin Compart 20 Amp Trailer Tow If ment Node CCN Yellow Equipped aa 15 Amp _ Selectable Power Ignition Off Draw Lt Blue _ Outlet IOD Power 12 20 Amp Mirror Switch Yellow Climate Controls MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Mini Cartridge Mini 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow IOD Wireless Ignition Off Draw 17 ku uc IOD Cabin e oc gu Compartment Node Steering Control CCN Interior Module SCM Lighting 40 Amp Battery Feed battery Feed Ra 18 Creen Auto Shutdown diator Fan Rela ASD Rela 15A IGN Run ACC Ignition Off Draw E End Cigar Lighter PWR 19 20 Amp IOD Power PUE Sunroof Mod Yellow Amp Feed 2 if equipped 20 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw Lt Blue IOD Radio 10 Amp a f 5 o o 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cartridge Ignition Run Cli mate Controls Hot Cupholder if equipped 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Lt Blue ASD Relay Feed 3 25 Amp B
127. ain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT in Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to m
128. aintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 204 STARTING AND OPERATING See CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engine running for an extended period If the against you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running f
129. ake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately three seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Tachometer The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 14 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair
130. ake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever into the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 WARNING NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro Never use PARK as a substitute for the parking longed periods with engine running Engine may be brake Always apply parking brake fully when started in this range Set the parking brake if you must parked to guard against vehicle movement and pos leave the vehicle sible injury or damage WARNING CAUTION Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition switch to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop DRIVE Six Speed Transaxle This range should be u
131. al override release lever forward e While holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL e Release the manual override NOTE If this occurs even if the override is successful it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Four Speed Six Speed Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking br
132. ally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to
133. an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use 031507582 Mist Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off positi
134. and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 399 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Co
135. and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specifie
136. arm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered but the warning signals have timed out the park and taillights flash three times instead of the normal twice and the horn wil
137. as 12 235 239 362 PULOSUCK con vc9o809 2 579 2 8 2 8 Pues 25 3 CE woe 246 IMS o cese RA SA ee aes Gag REGE 364 BIOITEDUMOB uaa ae nd di Re d RR XA E RUE 362 Operation ccu PRAET S RICE S SAEPE 239 Overdrive 64 45 5 4 0445 6444 oka APER EP 243 244 Selection of Lubricant aeuo sd RRES P ES 388 lr nsmusslORD 4122349324239 524 gU E See Transaxle ee INDEX 435 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry ITGHEDOUUDO ets 222258 fe reforiri 2 Saree xus 81 Tread Wear Indicators ua suem ened ee en 277 TELS COGOIBOIGE vu es d vaa que ese YT PPS Ces 150 Trip Odometer Reset Button 4 ce eer t 094 153 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 3 su uc aq E oe ium 37 Trunk Release Emergency auae sud Re E van 37 38 Trunk Release Remote Control 37 Tu dis ua od et eee kee Ve EA 108 154 381 uconnect Hands Free Phone 93 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 144 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 415 Universal Transmitter 2 2s oos ok hee pas egies 120 Unleaded Gasoline 4 4 ss oru 56554544 tidi 290 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 46 Upholstery Care aiidas a Cos PI HESS NM 368 Vanity MITOS dace ques ay a v xu SER acecb dure a d 93 Variance COMPASS saceieded ere donee oe i 165 Vehicle Certification Label 302 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loadin
138. ast three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 282 STARTING AND OPERATING M The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illumi nates you must increase the tire pressure to the recom mended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehic
139. at can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units In To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently displayed Press and hold the RESET button once to clear the function currently displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Displa
140. ately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C 298 STARTING AND OPERATINC M e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits
141. ations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL c
142. attery Feed Natural PWR Sunroof Feed Ignition Run 10 Amp Heated Mirrors If Red Faui quipped 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Lt Blue ASD Relay Feed 2 Ignition Run Oc cupant Classifica tion Module OCM Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Ignition Run Oc cupant Classifica tion Module OCM Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Hot Car No Fuse Required Ignition Run Heated Seats If Battery Feed Switch Bank Diagnostic Link Connector Powertrain Control Module PCM Battery Feed Anti Lock Brakes ABS Module if equipped Electronic Stability Program ESP Module If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Cartridge Mini Battery Feed Anti Lock Brakes ABS Module If 35 40 Amp Equipped Green Electronic Stability Program ESP Module If Equipped 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cartridge Mini Battery Feed Passenger Door 36 Module PDM Driver Door Mod ule DDM ee ep Natural If Equipped CAUTION e When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Totally Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure Continued CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use
143. ay be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can
144. be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas eee eee ee hae M 409 O Prepare For The Appointment 409 APrepare A List 44444 d eed apne ade aa 409 o Be Reasonable With Requests 409 W If You Need Assistance 409 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 410 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 410 O In Mexico Contact lt 2 244 xs uke eee D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 411 O Gervice CONUGC s sawa casas xe adhi 411 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 412 B MOPAR Parts acnoesa cde qae een 412 W Reporting Safety Defects 412 O In The 50 United States And Washington pP 412 0 In Canada 408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se W Publication Order Forms
145. by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body as pictured above 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel
146. c Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 045607537 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then tur
147. ce your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT llumi a nated e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake pages for the required maintenance intervals
148. cedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key
149. center on the rear of the center console enable of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the monitor to display video directly the switches from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to the uconnect studios section of uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF Back View Of Steering Wheel EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right controls 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Right Hand Switch Functions Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD i ration e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume Operatio e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume ach P the butt in th t f th itch to ch dba disant Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to fige ue vsu t e the beginning of the current track or to listen to the Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation beginning of the previous track if it is within one e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable second after the current track begins to play station up from the current setting
150. cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before attempting a jump start 6 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START Jump Starting Location position 060806842 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 9 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post NOTE Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for information on accessing the battery for service or replacement WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent Continued CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or of the immobilized vehicle FRE
151. conds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3
152. coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle win dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake l
153. ctly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU butt
154. d vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up seats used in the forward facing direction are for children to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older used either rearward facing or forward facing in the than one year These child seats are also held in the 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child NOUISINIING Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for e Improper installation can lead to failure of an CHildren in this section infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing Pile Follow the manulacturers direcione x more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback then the child should Used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt ing Peewee airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be
155. d Washers 112 o Headlights And Parking Lights 107 H Intermittent Wiper System 113 D Automatic Headlights If Equipped 107 EL Mist Feature ooo ec don oho oa eo caw tes 28 114 A jeadiene Time Delay eu sou ree Pr e d 108 o Headlights With Wipers Feature Available Turn Signals essel 108 With Automatic Headlights Only 115 Lane Change Assist eese 109 O Windshield Washers isse 115 4 High Low Beam Switch 0 109 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 116 OFlash To Pass LL LLL 109 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 117 O Fog Lights If Equipped 109 HTo Activate ee ee ee ee 117 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 O To Set a Desired Speed i292 993 118 o Auto Sunroof Express With Anti Pinch ED E e a sue dup pm US ews oan 118 Protection If Equipped 128 O To Resume Speed esses 118 O Sunshade Operation 0 128 3 To Vary The Speed Setting 119 LN iid BUCUR 4288s Suh 6 spp E a pee es 128 3 O To Accelerate For Passing 120 O Sunroof Maintenance 128 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 120 O Ignition Off Operation 129 O Programming HomeLink 121 B Electrical Power Outlets 129 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 124 er n Receiver MEME T Sel ei ny Reng as eee a
156. d could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Continued WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others fes four seconds The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni tors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on
157. d government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE See Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX eS dg s 5 bc dds topoO Ahd asese n About Your Brakes OMM E qM QM 292 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 254 Adding Engine Coolant Ant
158. d operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure uconnect gps RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing dow
159. de Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter _J Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessaryt Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine
160. dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is Operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover epee an A C Air Filter Replacement 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 7 Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on t
161. der a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Adjusting Active Head Restraints Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint m Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head Active Head Restraint Normal Position 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR under Occupant Restraints in Section 2 WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjust
162. door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse The instrument panel power outlet located below the climate control knobs has power available only when the ignition is ON This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Instrument Panel Power Outlet 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The center console power outlet is powered directly from NOTE the battery power available at all times Items plugged e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or element must be used prevent the engine from starting e Do not exceed the maximum power of 120 Watts 10 Amps at 12 Volts WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Console Interior ee UNDER
163. driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard OC Eur nd AA NS cS P4 M p Terin AREI i ETE PERSE PASH ES ME ENT 1 2 ORIGINAL TIRE S COLD TIRI E INFLATION PRES 200kPa egre SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of
164. ds lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls
165. e provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 4 Requested by police under a legal warrant Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s
166. e Control o 20 26 g42ne444 245 at a ona 217 Sn TILTLTP 169 172 186 189 198 Com Holder 2222 524 CpPEXAXA 2 136 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 217 Compact Spare te vauuessq uersus deg tiaki 275 Sono L H 164 Compass Calibration 444 an ye cae eee ERRORS 165 Compass Variance 649 553 6555 eee bee Gare 165 Computer tip Travel s scd beue E RTS ERST 20 162 CONSOLES 24 445 Sarees bee Sod mU ROREM S 104 136 Nn INDEX 421 Console Floor 2 4 5 443 484 646 R65 5655 ou 104 136 Contract Service ose 669246505446 4445 RE SS 411 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 357 COOMNG OVSICM 245 464 263 2 dior cena eet ae E 354 Adding Coolant Antifreeze eu exa ses 9o vs 356 Coolant Capac xacues heSRUE pee SE SORS 386 Coolant Level c ces aweee S webs EOS S 355 358 Disposal of Used Coolant 358 Drain Flush and Refill 355 FISPECHOM PD 358 Points to Remember 359 Pesse Cap a ticks ees eg P EIU PRAE eee es 357 ISGdntOf C UD anaes eee a ea nd pose EE OD Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 355 386 387 Corrosion Protection ee eee 365 Crankcase Ventilation Module 20 Cruise Control Speed Control 117 Crise Liene sse vigere ESO eee ee E SUP EA 152 CUDBOIdOES ou eus dh tee bg EUR ARS EUROS 104 132 370 Customer ASSBTANCE 4 uu op e spi S3 CEPS PES 409 Customer Programmable Features
167. e Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind an
168. e Head Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607497 Down And Rearward Reset Movement THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 3 E 022607757 Down Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also in
169. e Senden ese ri 320 JOM Pathe PD 325 Key Programming a ode 264 e476 o4e eee ante pane 16 Key BeplacemeUE nears 4 4 2 9 3o heen ea Mere oe 16 Key sentry ImtmobiliZeb aka adeh 62465 15 Koy dn Deme ssp s aru p d sse pere E xp uds 14 Keyless Entry S VSlefil eer aaea Soph ord e dose a 20 Keyless Entry System Sedan 3e Ee nos sa 20 INGVS STETE bees oie oe os ee eee ee ee 12 Knee Bolster 0 0 0000 eee eee eee 54 56 Lane Change and Turn Signals 154 Lane Chang Assist pant aay eh si S FA ee eH E 109 Lap Shoulder Bells us oko v9 sb oa ook e oe E 40 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 4 aye teehee ri bbs Hh ERR See ES 76 en INDEX 427 Lat us Sew BE ee RESI PESTESUEEESPREAS 84 FOOI ee arEEORIODUCPECRORE UR OU REUS E ee ees 104 Lead Free Gasoline less 290 Leaks Fluid eene 84 Ei Or Wiles 4444 bs 26s Boe eee ee eee oes 278 LIGNE Dals s asco EROR ee ee ve hee ee 84 377 mr Pr 84 106 POE arere 454 oat Bed ore eae 55 62 68 83 147 DaeRU D s tvawoduee soe ek ye PETS Ces 381 Brake VOD sos ee oec x rdc Robes 148 BUD Rep ACEM 200 svp acp yq noe 9 EROS 377 Center Mounted Stop 3 5 fA EORR EY RR ES 385 Day me IONS via oos rae scs ce Gok ewe c as a5 110 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 261 Engine temperature Warming sa duas dox Rn 148 laca qe T 64 n A TTC 109 154 380 Ead RE OWE ereere 2159 8 ME RES EE S 107 sss relies T
170. e correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flo
171. e high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion WARNING CAUTION A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se vere transmission damage or transmission failure drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature Indicator under continued operation could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 28 High Beam Indicator z This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro priate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in this section for more information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the
172. e immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level Four Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle Six Cylinder Engines the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addi tional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot
173. e oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 4 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section of the manual 15 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 16 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Single Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer The word Trip displays to show that the odometer is in Trip Mode Press and release the button again to change the displa
174. ed while the qin 030907533 vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats or seat covers These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats leather or cloth front driver and passenger seats The switches for the heated seats are located in the center console above the climate controls After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heat 4y ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise
175. efully follow these tire changing warnings to Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and Continued for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 321 NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack WARNING A Continued with two attachment points When the jack is partially expanded the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher es lt lt Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the Removing Jack Handle From Jack spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the the jack assembly ground 819b068d 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M s020200 819b068c Jacking Locations en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 323 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle
176. ehicle is not available a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 331 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing Without Power Override Transaxle Interlock System Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transaxle interlock system There is an override system that allows you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power To activate the override system e Firmly apply the parking brake e Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position e
177. elease lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Folding Rear Seat Armrest rM Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 2 Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood s 81 3 b 1 64e Hood Prop Rod Hole Location NOTE Before closing the hood make sure to stow the Hood Safety Catch prop rod in its proper location Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood 030407192 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to the left side of the steering column close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Multifunction Lever Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection 031407547 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Headlights and Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Eq
178. emoved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these ste
179. er attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instructions refer to In stalling the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 81965039 m Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles
180. er Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Engine Transaxle Max Frontal Area uw En DV MTOSS Inoue Max Trailer Tongue Wt 2 4L Auto 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 2 7L Auto 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 3 5L Auto 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 900 kg 200 lbs 90 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Section 5 of this manual Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields guards are not recommended for use with all four cylinder and 2 7L engines with automatic transaxle Please see y
181. er SET DECEL To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET
182. era 1m IE Cupholdes s saxo de pur rac ms 132 E Troubleshooting Tips se oes ms 125 piieed Coolst Cusholdunes O General Information 22s gh e 126 I EJUPped 43764 93e dos veo bees 4 ees oe 132 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 126 EL TRO Bottle Holdes oca dis dep a dre sess ue xS 133 O Sunroot Operation ereis 45644045 kiei 127 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M icu a ee a ee ee 134 Eua SOE Die 2522445 ene eeuoau ees 136 O Driver s Side Sunglass Holder D Video Console If Equipped 138 o RE ies W Rear Window Features 199 Sone E s o Rear Window Defroster 199 B Console Features sss 136 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped CAUTION This mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you Push in the button on the face To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning
183. erform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Press and release the STEP button to advance the display through the Trip Functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display This ECO message will appear when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance th
184. ervice center where it can be raised on a lift in the trunk Continued en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 319 Spare Tire Removal Preparations For Jacking Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 6 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual transaxle Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 6 Block both the front and rear of the WARNING Continued wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the Always park on a firm level surface as far from bei TM sel ii neath i pnm W i i i i il F Li KETTI LA HIR P EFR gt right front tire block the left rear the edge of the roadway as possible before raising wheel the vehicle a Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic while the vehicle is being jacked transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Jacking Instructions WARNING Car
185. eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force using a seat belt properly outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
186. es On Playing MP3 Files 205 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 207 D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 208 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REO RER RES Radios Only D System Activation o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna D Reception Quality D Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode O Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped ll Video Entertainment System VES CUPP o 65 5 Pees hd ee ee ll Remote Sound System Controls IP BOulpped a 4 22a hoe etos 94 e Ree es 215 O Right Hand Switch Functions 216 B Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operai Los peepee neha RO SL Eee ee Y 216 O Left Hand Switch Functions For Media i e CD Operation B CD DVD Maintenance 217 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 217 W Climate Controls 22e aus cm wr 217 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 218 D Automatic Temperature Control ATC EQUIPPE xu 1030 1303 ep Ah 5 222 Operating TIPS srati iier red geborene 228 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SSS INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1a15e80 Air Outlet 6 Radio 11 Storage Compartment 2 Side Window Demister Outlet 7 Passenger Airbag 12 Climate Control
187. es in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
188. essure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual
189. ets Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside becau
190. evel is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking Nee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Engine Oil Selection CAUTION For best performance and maximum protection under all Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the pressure and an increase in oil temperature This requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 could damage your engine American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Change En
191. f for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho Continued operation with reduced power steering rized dealer assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others CAUTION Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid leve
192. f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outl
193. fective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to c
194. flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required Nee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 WARNING Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst Breathing it can make you unconscious and can damage eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer CAUTION to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this l manua Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the
195. g format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 16 Digit Character Display Countr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM d If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Program Type 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 yo
196. g a se tye EYES VS WE s 268 302 303 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 NCWICIG OIOMAGe rarr rag oo eee aoe RUN ee oo qr 228 376 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System si an RR 215 MiscOsity DUI ON aor saiaga a aaa 344 Voice Recognition System VR 93 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 436 INDEX M Warnings and Cautions 4 ouseeuas tnter ses 6 Warranty Informauon a vac p aded eoe eee yo d 412 Washer Addme TIC PED CMM M 352 Washers Windshield 112 115 352 Washing Venice 4 sera ura 684 Bea ER RE a Oke 366 Water Dovne TUO s 24464 ius Ed ub oes asec 248 Wheel and Wheel Trim 3 0460 t adeR ther SR 367 Wheel and Wheel Tri Care eau esredeeecrsues 367 Wind Buffing uua puce dar eee 4900 on deas 36 128 Vdow FOC CIC ypres tee bia et t S PES 229 WINGOWS Mr 33 loc PETERET 33 Windshield Defroster 84 220 226 Windshield Washers 112 115 ld EEE EE P 352 Windshield Wiper Blades scs cua RES hs 351 Windshield WIDEtS ssi easa oett eS ETE SR 112 Wiper Blade Replacement 2 9 up x veeaoc dore pr 351 Wipers INICIMUNCIN sesers ea hah oe kaka Meat Bos 113
197. g messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Remote Keyless Entry Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not In PARK Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in ru motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Headlights On Key In Ignition Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance p
198. g until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Recognition VR in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side
199. gear third gear for six speed despite the for ward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event of a momentary problem the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the shift lever into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Restart the engine 5 Shift the shift lever into the desired gear range and resume driving 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transaxle cannot be reset dealer service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transaxle that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and im prove overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation By placing the shift lever one shift level below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to
200. ght seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to thei
201. ghts These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be Interior Dome Lamp 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There is a second light located midway back in the headliner To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The wipers and washers are operated by a switch NA on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507580 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blade
202. gine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L and 2 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and th
203. han non multisession discs ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or
204. he TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel 81ac2tfd NOTE The shift lever must be in PARK for this button to operate To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle press and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times With the ignition ON the word deck will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out the word deck will display until the trunk is closed On EVIC equipped vehicles the words Trunk Ajar will 2 display TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Trunk Internal Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached
205. he channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions uconnect phone lf Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES includes the following components for rear seat entertainment e A diagonal 7 in 17 8 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing 8199815e Opening the Rear Seat VES e The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se pum e A battery powered infrared remote control snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin 8199818b VES Video Screen NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position 81abfb61 VES Remote Control e The radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the
206. he child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear Ai ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the ch
207. he filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wi
208. here is a greater bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or contact You could be seriously injured towed If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start contact eyes skin or clothing Wear safety glasses can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes procedure carefully in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area imme WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when diately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not lean over the battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Continued Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M The battery is stored between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield Access is through the splash shield Jump starting remote battery terminals are located u
209. hicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Indicator Light The ESC Off Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Off Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Off Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions OFF WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
210. high This allows the heater core to act as a System Pressure Cap paragraph supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped 2 During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on a hot day the engine oil temperature may become too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph 85 km h until the engine oil temperature is reduced 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the 53 mph 85 km h You may of course reduce your vehicle speed further if needed JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or WARNING slippery areas e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you Spare Tire Stowage need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor s
211. ic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Fluid Level Check Vehicles with 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Use the following procedure to check the automatic transaxle fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the p
212. ident Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly including hazard flashers Automatic Transaxle The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range third gear for a four speed automatic and the fifth gear for a six speed AutoStick should be selected NOTE Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This ac tion will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval speci fied for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to
213. ifreeze 356 POCO UC 20 C 299 Adding Washer Fluid lt 2c d Sore wish wae a ois 992 Addiuves Tael acute p kc e EUER p d nd er ous 293 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 346 Air Conditioner Maintenance 348 PIPCONCIMONING o 4veguqpete ere PP We 218 Air Conditioning Controls s co epe tard 218 Air CondiHonine FICE 2iceus sace 285 dew v 229 349 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 230 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 348 349 Air Conditioning System 218 222 348 Air Pressure Tires llle 273 ADOUR 2a Ve aon enS eee eae ee R A 54 64 Adbqs Deployment 25 3 54460 Hee oe es PERPE 65 Airbag eq a ee a er ee ee 55 62 68 83 147 Aitbag Maintenance ee geo doa eter de 9 9 eee es 67 ADIS Dde X 57 61 64 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 61 64 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 154 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio Ln 210 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 355 356 386 DispOcdl asada pages 600 see eee eens 358 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 254 Anti Lock Warning Light 2 2943 ERE 254 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 APPENNINO CIE red riecuwicp sed beeches e 365 AONE APP 131 Auto Down Power Windows 34 Auto Unlock Doors leen ex Auto Up Power Windows Ls 35 128 Automatic Dimming Mirror
214. ifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will dec
215. ignals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 286 STARTING AND OPERATINC M 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mo
216. ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not turn on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an autho rized dealer es ry 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If you do not buckle up the light will remain on 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light quA This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Section 7 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi anl Ld tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitor
217. ild restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Rest
218. in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO WARNING AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Be sure ev
219. ing handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings 5 sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings TIRE CHAINS approved for your vehicle Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom Never use a tire with a smaller load index or mended capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load CAUTION index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used 280 STARTING AND OPERATING M SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROT
220. ion of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming Begin Programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If
221. ipped An integrated sunglass holder is located in the headliner above the sun visor To access the sunglass holder lower the sun visor Small items such as toll tickets can be stored between the two straps while sunglasses or other items can be stored above the two straps Sunglass Holder Cargo Area The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 When the seatback is folded to the upright position make WARNING Continued sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit WARNINCG e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury in seats and use seat belts e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal inj
222. is is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
223. ition Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee feature is programmable For details refer to Key Off Key In Ignition Reminder Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNINCG NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key NOTE e The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position e With either front door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Key le
224. itter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas
225. ive you fingertip control of all four power win dows E RENE S eene PIER X zo a Im curate AUTO Power Window Switch There is a single window control on the front and rear passenger s door trim panel which operates the front and rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when the accessory delay feature is active 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Window Down If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto Down feature These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to
226. k of sliding under the belt in a collision injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Positioning the Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediate
227. l chirp three times when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy reading lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open either door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped For details refer to Illumination Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk lower both front windows if equipped or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE e The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects e Inse
228. l should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ee If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade To apply the parking brake grasp the
229. lder If Equipped With this feature the rear cavity of the cupholder can keep cool beverages cool and hot beverages hot The rear cupholder heats to 140 F 60 C or cools to 35 F 1 6 C Heated or Cooled Cupholder The switch is located on the front of the center console and has three positions Heat Off and Cool ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING Rear Bottle Holders There are built in bottle holders located in both rear door When using the cupholder in the Heat position trim panels avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup T holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin n because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position CAUTION Make sure the beverage container can withstand the Rear Bottle Holder temperatures shown above when using the Cooled or Heated Cupholder 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury STORAGE Driver s Side Sunglass Holder If Equ
230. le may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 157 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION NOLE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and failure or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the
231. left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five sec onds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the sa
232. ler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate databas
233. ll come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 18 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQg lights or headlights are turned on 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 20 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 21 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 22 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped This light monitors the ABS This light will amp e3 come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approxi mately three seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however ee UNDERST
234. locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children un attended inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transaxle Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the Brake Transaxle Interlock system However an override system allows you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power To activate the override system e Firmly apply the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 e Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and rotate it to the ON position e Remove the cup holder liner e Insert a key screwdriver or finger into the hole at the front of the cup holder and push and hold the manu
235. ly Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that
236. m your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Heating and Air Conditioning 045607574 Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607577 OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 045607540 NOTE I
237. m 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the STEP button to exit Press the STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu ally Refer to Manual Compass Calibration ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the STEP button to display the follow ing programmable features Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects English Espanol or Francais depending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position all doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors
238. mance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE 3 Four Speed Transaxle This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear The trans axle will operate normally in first and second gear Shifts into third gear may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds The 3 range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 LOW Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac ceptable limits the vehicle computer will override DRIVE OVERDRIVE and 5 for six speed AutoStick transaxle and 3 for four speed trans axle range by changing shift points This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle automatically shifts into second gear third gear for six speed The transaxle remains in second
239. me selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to t
240. mers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton Mm withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five se
241. microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Refer to the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect
242. n 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD playe
243. n the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located O on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off Be sure to turn the system off when not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system will auto matically turn off when the ignition is turned OFF 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down on the lever and release SET DECEL Release the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the Electronic Speed Control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the lev
244. n after the six to eight second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrys
245. n off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance e While operating in AUTO the system will not auto matically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost mode must be manually se lected to clear the windshield and side glass Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature
246. nder the hood 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to LOCK for both vehicles WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Remove the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine compartment Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal WARNING of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to discharged battery The resulting electrical spark the following illustration for jump starting connections could cause the battery to explode and could result m in personal injury During
247. ne on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats m
248. ne time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then within 15 minutes insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child
249. ned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Partial ESC Mode This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the heater air conditioning controls When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation WARNING In the Partial ESC mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail able NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 264 S
250. never of the mirror to activate the dimming feature spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors The power mirrors switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The rotary knob has three separate positions L for the left mirror O for Off and R for the right mirror 81c7a8c8 1 Auto Dimming Mirror Power Indicator 2 On Off Switch 3 Auto Dimming Mirror Sensor UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 030407320 Power Mirror Switch Mirror Directions After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move When finished return the knob to the center Off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Adjusting Sideview Mirrors WARNING Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with Outside Mirror Passenger Side another vehicle or other object Use your inside Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle side of you
251. nformation 242 232 STARTING AND OPERATING ee E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 247 mP ee GI UOTE ow acea bn c qs PP ES RS 247 ELTIOCHIOEL s ae arie dC 9o E EE eeu RC on 248 Bl Driving Through Water 248 O Plow ine Rising Water usd doc eee aka 248 O Shallow Standing Water 249 Mi Power Steering 250 O Power Steering Fluid Check sese 251 aM Parking Brake s ose c se stak ne Es 252 W Anti Lock Brake System ABS 254 Bl Electronic Brake Control System 256 D Anti Lock Brake System ABS 257 OB Traction Control System TCS 257 O Brake Assist System BAS 257 o Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 258 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 260 B Tire Safety Information 264 my ricis EE MU EE 264 O Tire Identification Number TIN 267 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 268 Mi Tires General Information 272 E Hte PrOSSUMQ srecni nae Gea e 3 9 eee ee 272 O Tire Inflation Pressures 273 O Radial Ply Tifes sacerdos to hn doa t EA he 275 E COniDact apare TE cose epa dre hese ue xS 275 ELDue SPINNING a2 psscscheeubet EP EPOR 2 6 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 233 O Tyead Wear Indicators wx 9 news Sa 277 B Reformulated Gasoline 291 aLe QOCH 25292 5 2 529 ws S 278 B Gasoline O
252. ng severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer Reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolv ing the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace
253. ng flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down WARNING an impending overheat condition A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and ing the A ff hel his heat turning the A C off can help remove this heat vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of this heat the mode control to floor and the blower control manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling to
254. ng in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steer
255. ng the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning Center Console Cupholders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM The TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A l
256. nics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming pro
257. nnector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place Front Fog Lamp NOTE Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield uoo 1 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn 2 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp hous the replacement bulb ing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place Tail Stop Rear Turn Signal and Backup Lamps The taillamps are a two piece design The turn signal brake and taillamps are located in the rear corner body panel housing The backup and taillamps are located in the trunk lid housing 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See Changing the Tail Stop Lamp or Rear Turn Signal 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp Lamp 1 Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the taillamp 3 Grasp the taillamp housing and pull it firmly outward while pushing gently on the studs from inside to disen gage the housing from the vehicle
258. ns repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step
259. ns do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds 5 continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the 055007576 speed Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 278 STARTING AND OPERATING M Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulti
260. nward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select
261. o m O sj e esI e o e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 4C soe eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember tha
262. o e sexo S qr reai Kas 240 Replacement 6S a 6 ban s d PER yeee ses ages 278 Reporting Safety Defects amp aae dom ehe x aas 412 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 152 162 Restraint Head 0 00 00 cee eee 98 Restraints Child a uuu weg OS eo Y EHO RSS 70 Restraints Infant uu 4 64 oes 5 heh os OES GS 71 Reverse Viens rnm 381 Rotation Tires doudou eRe ES 280 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 83 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 84 Safety Defects Reporting 253 6 wx RPERE ES 412 Safety Exhaust Gas su 1d dopsdos dE R505 08 oS 5 3 82 safety Information Die 2v5 55204644423 69 264 Galetv WS apna epee ee Gide 4 eke Ree eae me 82 Satellite Radio Antenna sss 210 Satellite Radio uconnect studios 209 Schedule Maintenance leen 390 Seat Belt Maintenance sss 370 Seat Belt Reminder 52 53 Seat Belts xv hdexRRESEaeqXETPREPIPT ERES 83 Adj stable Shoulder Belt 2 ess ue e ie ae 46 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant Women agudo eta 2s omen ms 54 Child Restraint ss e224 coos ss vb boa ee ee 70 79 Extender MR 54 Fiont Seat id e39 32 54352934255 22345 40 42 Iso serio C as 83 Operating Instructions 24 0 vxo bt Ko RoE 42 Pretensioners 4 44 ex 545 4 DRE CAG GR CHES 48 Rear OCA ew 23 332 Soho tiit i RE P SE 40 Remmder 2323 9394 PERPE Ger KU ae ees 147 432 INDEX M Untwis ng
263. o your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 130 Ib T Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 271 2 2 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pr
264. oS errete na ea ERE raped 235 Enone Fails to Start 12 5 45 eu oteer senso aes 236 tartine and OperaiNe sairsrr rept f Heese nda 235 NS INDEX 433 Sarane Produts icu e 4e8enn WR PEST RS 295 Steering PONCE 425 43 04 s EE ERE NUI wees x oo 250 251 TECON 4628424640 e 088 209 SPORE RR o 116 Wheel THE suus vus ER ee SERE PE 116 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dy orci CONTOS eerd amp 9 9 49 hoa PIER UR eros 215 WTE senpri Tus ssh LARSRIETAESq 134 376 DIOIOBE VODICIS setodeea yee PE TS 228 ngu P rnm 328 DUM ROC taka ot ob eae oso 28 oe cone oo Rem 126 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 Py dene Eng me OIl eaea ae meaa oe e dero 345 juni A P TPC 149 julii C ee eee bg hee ees 381 Telescoping Steering Column 116 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 222 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 146 316 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Theft Alarm Security Alarm acesosecdemdiR tr 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 TH Slectine CODE acus doin S scm e s doe 116 Time Delay Headlight S3a ans mig dos dcus 108 Tire and Loading Information Placard 268 Tire Identification Number TIN 267 Tire Markings 24 5444ge28tobde or irta tiiis 264 Tire oalety Intofmadlbl s v aed qe s d ves Oe exe eee 264 Ves Gaugags owen ds eas ane aes eae 84 272 415 momo Lleol Wiles cucu we piete ped teu 278 Dung ii MP eee berks ead oes 2 2
265. ocated directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and tu
266. occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 Kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely e The following table shows examples on how to calcu exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities calculated in Step 4 of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred t
267. occupants and cargo for your vehicle CAUTION Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in in creased yaw or vehicle instability A negative trailer tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability Negative trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer tow ing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam
268. of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Front Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Center Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Visor Vanity Lampe s ss esses ia rte cn ncs A6220 Glove Box Lamp cosa goa qc accede RR dec A6220 Shift Indicator Lamp s sess d is 202 945 IKLE14140 Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 579 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam Headlamp ocuUs ef 8 9 9 3 9 Os H11 High Deam Headlamp s dace dou eee ae P 9005 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lamp 3757A Front DOS Ef 25 8 tok 4 ae reanimira PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop CHMSL LAM 6446 eE ra beeTiawgVTaTqe d W16W 921 Rear Tail Stop LAMP se s qeu aid doe dE 373 05 en 9157 Rear Tum Signal Lamps 40 2465 ene
269. ollision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seatback Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the front switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat The rear switch controls the seatback recliner Mir m 030907659 Power Seat Switches 1 Front Switch 2 Rear Switch 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article un
270. ome areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION For vehicles equipped with a 2 4L or 3 5L engine DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Etha nol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components NOTE The 2 7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 For more information see Flexible Fuel in this section Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 202 STARTING AND OPERATING ee E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e dr
271. ommit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Custo
272. on 00 82 294 Fouls TO SUID owe hae S Sas 6 P FO amp er s ERE 236 Hooded Starting 424 xi y sechnR REL RR RR 236 Fuel Requirements as 4 04 actus o eek ra 290 386 Jomp SE CE 325 Oll 4o ba ge bk dw ah Gee HS piri 342 386 387 Oil Change Interval 152 162 343 390 CUIDDIBE Cap 244404 ruo ded eo p S 335 336 337 344 Oil Filter 22254 9939 5054 LT ERA HS 345 Oil Filter Disposal uou psit bebe Gene ened 345 Nn INDEX 423 Oil Selection 46462 4s444aee25 5 ows 343 386 EUPSUBIBOBE sorire eee ee eae GOES 345 COVEIDISQUBIE 2 ados pes d ap d oe ee aris a rod 316 DIATU DIO nonce cate ee m eee anata hese 299 Temperate Galige uisa deca ree ced qe vs 146 Engine Oil VIScOSIDY cius xem gogo Regn graecus 344 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 65 Entry System Illuminated 2 5 20 Ethanol veeeedecedecedeeeteee PE ES ane 29 Exhaust Gas Caution 82 294 353 Phau oys E rr 82 352 Extender Seat Belt css bc 64h 245a REY 54 EXIGNOI EIS US Gena ode easy on apa CR HR ee oe ir 84 Fabric Care siitnseeeees asceoenegasacen sa 368 Filler Location Fuel 146 299 Filters Pur Cleaner 2922229922910 ee ee RESET SS 346 par CONGINONING s 3 9 e404 11 good eos 229 349 Automatic Transaxle leen 364 Lucie sg sen oe58 bee Heese ages 345 387 Ene QU Disposal x sea exon pare Sap d ee os 345 dE MR TNETCETITTTSTPETTTTSTITRTISTT 316 Hazard Vann sree cisocana Soda d ded ACE ER 316 T
273. on the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column gaan Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel Lock To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operatio
274. on on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the
275. one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may on and off and the Illuminated Entry system if apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate equipped will turn on 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a 2 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency RF noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters j amp a 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 81182c72 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transm
276. onger to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allo
277. ontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory
278. or more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle FLEXIBLE FUEL 2 7L ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE The 2 7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only aaa vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can aoe operate on E 85 81ae46a9 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approxim
279. or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and
280. ors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 60
281. ot spin the l wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Your vehicle may be towed with all four wheels flat on the ground under the following conditions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 25 km 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Continued e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another e The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h CAUTION e Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans axle may result axle failure If the transaxle is inoperative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be transported either with a flatbed truck or with the front wheels off the ground otherwise transaxle damage may occur If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC position Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Continued If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing v
282. our authorized dealer for additional informa tion 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme condi tions Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 057003767 e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight put in or on your vehicle stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section for the maximum combined weight of
283. p starting To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result 348 MAINTAINING YOUR
284. per blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
285. ps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with EVIC For details refer to Illuminated Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e For
286. quency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the followin
287. r Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in Manual Seat Adjusting Bar eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If Equipped A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort for petite as well as tall drivers A lever with a ratcheting D i 7 mechanism located on the outboard side of the seat Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever raises and lowers it Total travel is 2 2 in 56 mm 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Reclining Bucket Seats WARNING The recliner control is on the side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then lean e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is back to the desired position and release the lever Lean dangerous The sudden movement of the seat forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its could cause you to lose control The seat belt might normal position not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a c
288. r 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and J Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and L Rotate tires replace if necessary 1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the spark plugs 2 4
289. r full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if i
290. r vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the seen in the passenger side mirror vehicle eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Refer to Voice Recognition VR in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Illuminated Vanity Mirror 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie SEATS the position desired Then using body pressure move Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat of the vehicle They need to be used properly for sate adjusters have latched operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Front Seat Adjustment The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floo
291. r will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio di
292. radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant ant
293. raint Tether Strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint s Child Restraint Tether Strap A Tether Strap Hook B Tether Anchor Installing 1 Cover 3 Attaching Strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed
294. rease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e The warming words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistanc
295. rn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display 16 Digit Character Program Type iss Display No program type or un 7 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program T
296. rn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near rf If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 2 In very cold weather pim if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 235 HD Automatic Transaxle 235 ANormal Statue wc our Sack HOR E ves 235 D Extreme Cold Weather H Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transaxle Interlock System o Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock vic PTT Below 20 FOr 29 se casica set but ee 236 H Four 5peed Six Speed Automatic Transaxle aU Ee deas Adit eu isse EerISE ed 236 El ear Ranees Mm EAT Stari aa oes ty hae epre ye Xe wes 238 W AutoStick If Equipped Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 238 sito M P W Automatic Transaxle 239 O General I
297. rn to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or Mix mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under cer tain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recircula tion Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Mix and then press the Recirculation button This fea ture reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze
298. roper level Do not overfill 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts for the correct fluid type Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid Level Check Vehicles with 3 5L Engine The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is disassembled for any reason Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 CAUTION Do not use chemical flush
299. rting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter 815afata Vehicle Key To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The Illuminated Entry system if equipped will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key r
300. rtrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 248 STARTING AND OPERATING M Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
301. s Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors B Inside Day Night Mirror D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped O Power Mirrors D Adjusting Sideview Mirrors o Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped W uconnect phone If Equipped ll Voice Recognition VR System If Equipped ll Seats 89 89 90 90 02 9 93 93 O Manual Front Seat Adjustment 94 O Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster K EOQUIDPCG PP 95 O Reclining Bucket Seals 1 ces creer 44s 96 O Lumbar Support If Equipped 97 O Power Seats If Equipped eoovers eeses 97 D Adjusting Active Head Restraints 98 o Heated Seats If Equipped 101 H Fold Flat Passenger Seatback 102 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM FIPOMine Kear Seat 4 sow 39 SIE SWAT 103 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 110 o Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest 104 A Lights Om ISeDUBUSE ua ud saat E exped 110 B Io Open And Close The Hood 104 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 110 EIUS 23 x3 qx qa d EHE ENS NER Ep ES 106 o Map Reading Interior Lights IH E NTUIBEUHCHOI Levet 3 sub eus b Eso po a he a 106 W Windshield Wipers An
302. s whether the severity or type of rear impact require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and passenger seat AHR s will be deployed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear end impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Section 3 Adjust ing Activ
303. s 170 ome NORROUSIDIDEDIASODNSERIOIA EMI O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 170 pobre a Mea ace He ge ek aw P 161 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD Oil Change Required 3 0 03e8 5 054 Ges 162 And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 178 Ep Fon HONS uu dorus gen OE ene I oo a 162 H Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 180 H Compass Display ses os te eae aoe bars 164 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M D List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 183 O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 183 ll Sales Code RER REN AM FM CD DVD Radio If EQUI Ded e 66st cage on ees Kae 3 186 O Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped 186 D Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped esee 186 O Clock Setting Procedure Lose tuck hed 4 a G 186 ll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack lesse 188 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 188 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play sus oa oo ee em n 191 o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 193 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 196 ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And DIEFUS SACO a5 624 Rande e Pd dicebas 197 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 197 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 203 o Not
304. s Re ed 146 Light Sansone hee as a RN PROP En E dE ae 147 Materials Added 0 0 eee 293 Methanol S45 swa sou be Abe EG Edu 291 Octane RUND amp sce qud d ardeo teme EORUM e Roe 290 387 ROGUIFGHICHIS uxo a uro 86050 niin PER 290 386 lank COACH uuagnkasooefiqeeeesRP S SES 386 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System CANON 4644 6 cde oe none eod 300 PUCHING ur Pr e 299 BUSCS aeree 4 RA EESTI bck ee ees See 9 1 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 120 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 299 301 338 Gasoline Clean Air 2 zc t RR 85 291 Gasoline Fuel 23493 9e x PE ERR EP 290 Gasoline Reformulated 291 en INDEX 425 Gauges Coolant Temperature 24545260444 ihre eS 146 lor 146 S oro PES 150 TaXCHOMClel uade e suce s Peta a ese qoe d ado 149 Gear i P 242 Co DTP 242 General Information 000 17 289 General Niaiitenahice we ess dev vex e pe nes aw a4 341 Glass ClGGHING D PC 369 Gross Axle Weight Rating as 000 64 454 40 302 305 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 302 304 til 302 Hands Free Phone uconnect 93 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water gt tau 9 ek eee I RSS PPS DEDE 248 Hazard Warning Plasher a 26e esh hec ERR 316 Head Restraints 0 0 cee eee eee 98 FICAGMCMIS TET 377 Bulb Replacement seeds 4 1328 Sme du edd us 377 C oxacenex terega rE 367 P e Beam
305. s from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off idii position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Settings Intermittent Wiper System NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause are operating The wipers will resume operation when between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle Mist Feature every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single between cycles wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the For vehicles equipped with the Speed Sensitive Intermit wipers will continue to operate tent Wiper System the wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will double WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to
306. s started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ee VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident
307. s various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Br
308. sasra ep kirka eee cece ene HUS 97 Maintenance Free Battery xou ood 544 4 SOS 545 346 Maintenance General eee 341 Maintenance Procedures leen 341 Maintenance Schedule 390 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 157 339 Manual Service cao eim dneuep REF Gd boo hoe a OE 413 Map Reading Tights Losses qd os Gee aon d god 11i Master Cylinder Brakes 0 360 Methanol xa xem ug EEWRAPGCRGA MU ele zu 291 Mit Irip Compulef s cosa de sare ur soe 162 hinne e 9 3E ATREGSSRREZGGSSASUESUEEGA RES 89 AutomabcDIRUDE aida d ehe RE ERAS E AS 90 Electric Powered ea Eme 90 Outside sessed a aaae a aaa EEE E i E 92 Rearview seer 64 soko GS Ee OS ee tai 89 p a 42444 46s 5 eee Scan eee eae eee eae ee 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System vui ces xd s 281 Mopar Taris lt erras ee 340 412 MIBE ETBE sires 64 G e8 4 bb 555 EX BR A 291 New Vehicle Break In Period 81 Nn INDEX 429 Occupant Restraints 644i o 624 reproser e 61 65 Occupant Restraints Sedan 39 57 58 61 64 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 290 Odometer 0 00 cee ee eee 150 jl P Pr TT 150 153 Oil Change Indicator s iuter 152 162 390 Oil Change Indicator Reset 152 162 CLASS 2s sacs dos en Pet pt keee 342 387 Capa x aseetod cane dew pup BUR AEN oe ce 386 Change Interval 24s aaia een 15
309. se of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level e Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor Mix or Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these modes the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be dis abled automatically is these modes are selected The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automati
310. sed for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ee transaxle shifting occurs in the DRIVE range For ex ample When operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving it provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with AutoStick you can reduce the frequency of transaxle shifting during heavy loading hilly terrain strong headwinds or while towing Under these conditions selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick will improve the perfor
311. select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range indicator NOTE In Autostick mode the transaxle will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved from the AutoStick position into the DRIVE position General Information e You can start out from a stop in any gear except sixth The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when Autostick is engaged The transaxle will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick is engaged If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powe
312. services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sant
313. sler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 397 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine except PZEV Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter
314. specific messages LoW TirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a transaxle over temperature condition When this condition occurs the HOTOIL message will be displayed in the odom eter along with a chime NOTE When this message is displayed bring the vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the message clears Raising the idle of the engine slightly will help speed up the cooling gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the gASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engin
315. splay of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates
316. ss Entry RKE transmitter will not function Locking the Doors with the Key There is only one external door lock cylinder which is located in the driver s door only You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward To unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication see Body Lubri cation under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 Maintaining Your Vehicle of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEYS The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electro
317. struct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE e The following steps must occur within the first 60 sec onds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position e Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivat ing BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn Qo on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each time when unbuckling 4 Turn the ignition switch
318. sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
319. suggest that the indicator bulb is defective ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Light Control 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at lower intensity whenever
320. sure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave s
321. t BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 258 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activate the
322. t your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 276 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Prolonged use of limited use spare or an incorrect tire size on either front wheel may damage transaxle differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or icy conditio
323. t your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual GLOW PLUG C MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT 6 ou TEM TEMP i WINDSHIELO WIPER EXTERIOR BULB INTERMITTENT FAILURE i w 3 9 T am I AND WABHER E SRS ne AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF e 7 d amp TURN SIGNALS RM A 0 lt j af Rg KEY ACTIVATE wee eel C n WINDOW LUFT POWER OUTLET y e an HOOD RELEASE TENA Ps G 0 DEFROST ANO VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK LOWER AIR OUTLET Gs e amp ah SLIDING DOOR wane AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT TETHER ANCHOR Ce j e ra T LOWER AN cuong SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LMOHTER e TETHER FOR RELEASE HANDLE HILDREN LATCH D lt be DOOR AJAR NP UP uP o ow 1 THE PRESSURE MONITOR UCONNECT BUTTON M E OWNERS
324. ted at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button in until the setting is correct The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held 819f2c59 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate se e 6 DISC MP3 WMA 042005200 REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stoppin
325. tems are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC Airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad
326. the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE Check the four speed automatic transaxle fluid level before towing The AutoStick six speed transmis sion is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealership service center for assistance Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating take the following actions e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put the transaxle in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving Reduce speed e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drive train will result NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flasher ll if Your Engine Overheats O Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped 917
327. the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TP
328. the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost I
329. ting straight forward 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Release the clutch pedal 2 3 4 Start the engine 5 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 sec onds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Customer Programmable Features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the ve
330. tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
331. to gasoline operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure Puch ener ep aae Cap that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left rear patible parts quarter panel of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability Fuel Filler Door 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ee After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable NOTE If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling
332. to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and stow it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed
333. trol Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window defroster only when the engine is operating window NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 144 O Personal Settings B Instrument Cluster 145 Customer Programmable Features W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 146 W Setting The Analog Clock ll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 6 Disc CD DVD Changer I POQUID DEG uud sure E sd ei PS gU Poe oes 159 MP3 WMA AUX fac cc
334. turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 042305233 SEEK Buttons RES RSC Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch TUNE SCROLL O 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition VR in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Recognition VR in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen
335. u wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 DISC AUX Button radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode ejected before a new disc can be loaded Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio MP3 Audio Play ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at
336. uals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consul
337. ugh to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Make sure that e The child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed
338. uipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for detent AUTO will activate the automatic headlight headlight operation system 031407548 031407553 Headlight Switch Headlight Switch 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and turn off based on the surrounding light levels Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function lever must be rotated to the off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC under Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 to turn this feature On Off or set the time interval Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would
339. ulated User selectable A C on or off 81a12736 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting
340. unted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the
341. ure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to
342. uring express closing anytime an obstacle that restricts glass movement is detected the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching the object Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if so equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front
343. ury follow these guidelines for The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the loading your vehicle rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier children when the vehicle is in motion They could objects as low and as far forward as possible be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to Continued Sway 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dan gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision CONSOLE FEATURES The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort Two cupholders each of which can accommodate large beverage contain ers A one piece cupholder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cupholders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz 5 L bottles An optional removable ashtray may be located in the one cupholder Console Features Dual Storage Bins Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged armrest provides access to these storage areas ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
344. uttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee 0 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmiss
345. valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 284 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pres
346. vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this section of the manual for more information about ABS Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The sys tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the bes
347. vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Using The Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped The RKE remotely lowers both driver and passenger front windows simultaneously Lowering the front win dows using the RKE is a two step operation 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once 2 Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the button until the windows lower completely or the win dows drop to the desired level then release the button Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least
348. w gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining
349. w type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jum
350. when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on STARTING AND OPERATING 255 If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the Anti Lock Brake ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required See your authorized dealer When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h 256 STARTING AND OPERATING M ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice sno
351. ws the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren dire
352. xygenate Blends 291 E Replacement Mites s use nte ee ea eee tose s 278 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 292 Mie Chins REP 279 O MMT In Gasoline 0005 292 Snow Ties csc tcanegeegeuicauas ad ae 280 O Materials Added To Fuel 293 Mi Tire Rotation Recommendations 280 H puel SystenyCauuons a c does d eh 44 4 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 281 D Carbon Monoxide Warnings G Base System ausos ea ea enseets ose ens 284 W Flexible Fuel 2 7L Only If Equipped 295 O Premium System If Equipped 286 oO E 85 General Information 295 O General Information 289 D Ethanol Fuel E 85 000 297 B Fuel Requirements 0 00 290 oO Fuel Requirements sss v oa e4e40464 4 297 ELTE CLA T EDENE ce etic ave ean mens 290 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel O35LEngine eese 290 Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 298 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Sheed ae dE PAUSE SWAT 298 ALOAN ssa ees 6 GaSe ee oee saan ees 303 OC ru ising Kane o Pneu tonne et bee ea M 298 W Trailer Towing CPP 304 A Replacement Parts ae coepere s 299 H3 Common Towing Definitions 304 O MAMENANG oue ga aides pn a gee ee eye o5 299 O Trailer Hitch Classification 306 Mi Adding Fuel 2432 06 ee ve Ie3U PIG Bora Rus 299 O Trailer Towing Weights 4 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap
353. y D The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com COM pass heading and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the STEP button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button and the CAL indicator will quit
354. y back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first set the display to Trip Mode Then push and hold the button approximately 2 seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom CTET Dual Trip Odometer If Equipped Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it a second time to change the display to Trip B Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately 2 seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Indicator Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light wi
355. y cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 MPEG Audio 54 22 05 16 y 56 48 Sampling Bit Rate kbps Frequency KHz P MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load t
356. y service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPARS flui
357. ype mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ee NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES

Here - Silberauto

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents